<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en-GB">
	<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=202.74.223.0%2F24</id>
	<title>Tatters of the King - User contributions [en-gb]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=202.74.223.0%2F24"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Contributions/202.74.223.0/24"/>
	<updated>2026-10-25T03:01:23Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.46.2</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Tatters_of_the_King&amp;diff=3268</id>
		<title>Tatters of the King</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Tatters_of_the_King&amp;diff=3268"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:21:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Locations */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Tatters_Cover.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tatters of the King&#039;&#039;&#039;[http://catalog.chaosium.com/product_info.php?products_id=773&amp;amp;osCsid=07f84f248e3a49f3cf6199ee7fbb6629] is a Call of Cthulhu campaign written by Tim Wiseman and published by [http://chaosium.com Chaosium] and through which our role-playing [http://tentaclesandunderpants.info group] is currently being run. Play started on May 8th 2006. See [[current events]] for next session date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The game is being played in the suburb of Ellerslie, in [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Auckland Auckland, New Zealand].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The game is initially set in [http://www.yog-sothoth.com/docs/article-london-guide-1928.pdf London], [http://greywolfnz.homeip.net/wiki/attachments/1928.doc 1928]. It is the start of a bitterly cold winter, the worst in decades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
London is the capital of an empire covering a quarter of the globe and governing one quarter  of the human race. The people busy themselves with concerns of politics and government, finance and production, work and recreation. How fragile things are. What ignorance there is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are those whose engage in different pursuits - who would see an inhuman power come to Earth such that it would make mundane activity seem like a last twitch before dying.........&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Keeper of Arcane Lore==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Game Master is [[Mark Chiddicks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Players==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The players are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nicola Bishop]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julia Blackmore]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Marcus Gustafsson]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Darryn Mercer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Player Characters]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:crew2.jpg|right|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] - A failed writer, looking for his big story, played by Darryn Mercer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Andrew Saunders]] - British Museum curator and proud Scot, Played by Julia Blackmore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Captain George Withers]] - Coldstream Guards. Career soldier. Played by Nicola Bishop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;[[Umberto]]&#039; - Mysterious former Vatican investigator. Played by Marcus Gustafsson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Doctor Frederick Bartlett]] (deceased) - Eminent research psychologist, played by Marcus Gustafsson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notable Non-Player Characters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Prologue - Opening Night&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Talbot Estus]] (deceased) - American novelist, now debuting as a playwright&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;The Group&#039;&#039; - an amateur theatrical troupe:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Michael Gillen]] - Retired publisher, amateur actor and acquaintance of [[Doctor Frederick Bartlett]]. Estus&#039;s friend and companion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Hannah Keith]] - Amateur Actress and sister of [[Andrew Saunders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[George Keith]] - Amateur Actor and husband of [[Hannah Keith]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Walter Paige]] - Amateur Actor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Jean Hewart]] - Amateur Actress&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter One - The Madman&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dr. Charles Highsmith]] - Asylum Superintendent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Alexander Roby]] - Incarcerated Madman&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lucius Harriwell]] - Incarcerated Madman&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Price and Evans]] - Asylum Nurses&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Two - A Walk in the Park&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dr. Lionel Trollope]] (deceased) - Roby family physician&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Grahame Roby]] - Financier, Alexander Roby&#039;s brother&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Detective Inspector Andrew Taylor]] - of New Scotland Yard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Delia Hartston]] - Alexander Roby&#039;s former fiancee, now [[Delia Morrison]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Peter Morrison]] - Abusive husband of Delia&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Vincent Tuck]] - Private Detective, hired by Grahame Roby&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Michael [[Coombes]] (deceased?) - Sinister stalker, Bacon&#039;s ex-bodyguard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Three - Springer Mound &amp;amp; the Canal&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Harold Jennings]] (deceased) - Unfriendly Suffolk farmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Montague Edwards]] (deceased) - Alexander Roby&#039;s secret guardian&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lawrence Bacon]] (deceased) - Antiquarian, occultist and sorcerer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Four - The Flight North &#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Cec Watts]] (deceased) - Tabloid Journalist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Henry Lister]] - Terrified cultist and necrophobe&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Aleister Crowley]] - Famed Occultist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Five - To Walk Upon the Earth in Carcosa&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Quentin Spence]] - Poet and Failed Cultist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Noss]] of Yhtill - Leather worker from an alien world&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Yolanda]] - Noblewoman from [[Cassilda]]&#039;s court&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Six - Talk of Goatswood&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Wilfred Gresty]] (deceased) - Writer of letters and spy for the Goatswood cult&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Seven - Nug&#039;s Farm&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Hillary Quarrie]] - Estranged wife of Malcolm and priestess of the Goat&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Atkinson]] (deceased) - Ailing leader of the Goatswood Shub-Niggurath cult&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Eight - The Brothers of the Yellow Sign&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Paolo Tuminardo]] - Milanese Guide and young Fascist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Giuseppe Colombo]] - Ancient, curmudgeonly Italian Brother of the Yellow Sign&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Thomas Villiers]] (deceased) - Insane artist and Brother of the Yellow Sign&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Nine - The Viceroy of India&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] - Minor diplomat and lounge lizard, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Ian Gore]] - Missionary, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mrs [[Henrietta Tullis]] - Matronly figure, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Stephen Thomas]] - Quiet, bookish man, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Francesca Nicholson]] - Bright young thing, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Patricia Berry]] - Quiet, shy young lady, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Ten - A Thousand Miles&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Sivakumar Patel]] - Guide and translator from Bombay&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Jigme Rinzing]] - Nepalese merchant/guide&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Eleven - To Drakmar&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Tsewan Pemba]] - Tibetan Guide &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Carlo Schippone]] (deceased) - Graduate student and Himalayan adventurer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Twelve - The Upper House&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - &#039;&#039;Alpini&#039;&#039; officer and Himalayan adventurer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Roberto Anzalone]] - Professor of Asian History and Brother of the Yellow Sign&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Malcolm Quarrie]] - Elusive scientist and occultist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Literary Works==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Carcosa, or The Queen and the Stranger]]  - a fantasy in two acts, [http://greywolfnz.homeip.net/wiki/attachments/CARCOSA.pdf script] by [[Talbot Estus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Le Roi en Jeune]] - a rare French play, playwright anonymous&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_King_in_Yellow The King in Yellow] - a collection of short [http://www.yankeeclassic.com/miskatonic/library/stacks/literature/chambers/stories/kinginye/contents.htm stories] by [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Robert_W._Chambers Robert W Chambers]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[An Inhabitant of Carcosa and Haita the Shepherd]] - by [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ambrose_Bierce Ambrose Bierce]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Der Wanderer durch den See]] - by [[Alexander Roby]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[British Gods]]: Religion and Myth in the Western Kingdoms of Anglo-Saxon Britain - by [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Turner Codex]]: A translation of Mesoamerican prayers and libations to Hastur - trans. M. Turner &#039;&#039;et al&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Tatters of the King]]: A book of short stories by [[Nathaniel Browne]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Revelations of Glaaki]]: The Goatswood cult&#039;s compilation of occult knowledge&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.mdx.ac.uk/www/study/mapengwa.htm  Map of England and Wales, 1928]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.yog-sothoth.com/docs/article-london-guide-1928.pdf London], England - [http://www.londonancestor.com/maps/roads-central.htm Map of London, 1926]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Scala Theatre]], Charlotte St, London&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[St Agnes Asylum]], [[Weobley]], Herefordshire, England&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Clare Melford]], Suffolk, England&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Loch Mullardoch]], near Inverness, Scotland&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Carcosa]], a dream city made flesh&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Goatswood]], an area of the Severn Valley in Gloucestershire&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nug&#039;s Farm]], Hillary Quarrie&#039;s home, in the Goatswood region&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Milan]], Lombardy, Italy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Viceroy of India]] - Modern P&amp;amp;O passenger liner, en route to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[India]], the gateway to Nepal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Bombay]], port of entry to India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nepal]], mountain kingdom, closed to Westerners&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Mustang]], a small kingdom in Northern Nepal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Drakmar]], in Mustang, the legendary site of the death of the ogress Balmo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;As referred to in the session reports below, there have been a number of [[murders]] related to the Roby case.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 1]] - Opening Night&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 1.5]] - The Madman&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 2]] - The Plot Thickens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 3]] - Alexander&#039;s Friends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 4]] - Teeth of Winter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 5]] - Four Go Mad in London&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 6]] - Death by Night, Death by Day&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 7]] - Missing Persons&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 8]] - To Walk Upon the Earth in Carcosa&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 9]] - Aftermath - a Year in the Lives...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 10]] - Nug&#039;s Farm, or &amp;quot;Are You Local?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 11]] - Il Fratelli di Signo Giallo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 12]] - The Viceroy of India, or &amp;quot;May I Have This Dance?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 13]] - A Matter of Honour&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 14]] - The Pilgrimage of Grace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 15]] - Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Carlo_Schippone&amp;diff=3267</id>
		<title>Carlo Schippone</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Carlo_Schippone&amp;diff=3267"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:19:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Schippone2.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Carlo was [[Roberto Anzalone]]&#039;s graduate student and travelled on the expedition with Anzalone, [[Malcolm Quarrie]] and Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
His diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), discovered in the Nepalese village of Kag, shows a great mental deterioration after reaching [[Drakmar]]. According to reports from [[Te]] he had returned alone from Drakmar, claiming his companions had been &#039;taken by ghosts&#039; and was being nursed to health by the monks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the investigators reached the Monastery at Te they came under fire from Schippone, who wounded their guide before [[Withers]] put a bullet through his brain from long range. It was discovered that Schippone had killed the monks and had been living alone in the Monastery for many weeks.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3266</id>
		<title>Jigme Rinzing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3266"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:19:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Jigme.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This quiet, polite Nepalese merchant guided the investigators&#039; Nepalese expedition as far as the town of Gora Padi. He spoke no English, so the investigators never really got to know him, but the impression they got was that he was a man of few words, and even had there been no language barrier they would have fared little better.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3265</id>
		<title>Jigme Rinzing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3265"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:19:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Jigme.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This quiet, polite Nepalese merchant guided the investigators&#039; Nepalese expedition as far as the town of Gora Padi. He spoke no English, so the investigators never really got to know him, but the impression they got was that he was a man of few words, and even had their been no language barrier they would have fared little better.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Tsewan_Pemba&amp;diff=3264</id>
		<title>Tsewan Pemba</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Tsewan_Pemba&amp;diff=3264"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:17:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Pemba.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This hardy, wiry young Nepalese Tibetan guided the investigators from Gora Padi to just beyond Kag, where the local tales of ghosts and the ogress Balmo was too much for his superstitious nature and he abandoned them, taking with him all six of their native bearers.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3263</id>
		<title>Jigme Rinzing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Jigme_Rinzing&amp;diff=3263"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:15:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Jigme.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This quiet, polite Nepalese merchant guided the investigators&#039; Nepalese expedition as far as the town of Gora Padi&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3262</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3262"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:12:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 2nd 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and when they did not, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3261</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3261"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:11:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 16th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3260</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3260"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:11:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday February 15th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3259</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3259"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:10:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Tuesday February 14th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3258</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3258"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:10:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday February 13th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3257</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3257"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:09:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday February 13th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3256</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3256"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:09:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday February 8th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3255</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3255"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:08:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday February 17th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3254</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3254"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:08:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 16th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3253</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3253"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:08:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday February 15th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3252</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3252"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:07:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Tuesday February 14th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3251</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3251"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:06:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday February 13th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any firther, and he begs his friends not to go themsleevs. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the Monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3250</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3250"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T08:01:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Sunday February 12th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3249</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3249"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:55:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Saturday February 11th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3248</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3248"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:55:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Saturday February 11th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3247</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3247"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:54:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday February 6th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone&#039;s diary]] ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3246</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3246"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:53:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Saturday February 11th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone&#039;s diary]] ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3245</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3245"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:45:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday February 10th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3244</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3244"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:45:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday February 10th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[TSewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3243</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3243"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:41:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 9th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3242</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3242"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:37:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday January 30th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3241</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3241"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:36:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday February 8th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3240</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3240"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:34:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Tuesday February 7th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3239</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3239"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:34:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday February 10th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3238</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3238"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:33:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Tuesday February 7th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3237</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3237"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:32:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday February 6th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3236</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3236"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:29:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Sunday February 5th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3235</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3235"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:27:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Saturday February 4th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3234</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3234"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:24:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday February 3rd 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3233</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3233"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:23:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 2nd 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3232</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3232"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:23:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday February 2nd 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, YAngser Chumpo told them they must leave, and whgen they did no, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3231</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3231"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:15:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday February 1st 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3230</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3230"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:13:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Tuesday January 31st 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3229</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3229"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:12:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday January 30th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3228</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3228"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T07:07:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Sunday January 29th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crossing the border. Day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3227</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3227"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T05:42:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Saturday January 28th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preparation for the trek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crossing the border. Day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3226</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3226"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T05:42:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday January 27th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guides hired, lead by [[Jigme Rinzing]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preparation for the trek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crossing the border. Day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3225</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3225"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T05:41:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Friday January 27th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this own of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guides hired, lead by [[Jigme Rinzing]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preparation for the trek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crossing the border. Day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3224</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3224"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T05:38:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday January 26th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival in Nautanwa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guides hired, lead by [[Jigme Rinzing]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preparation for the trek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crossing the border. Day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3223</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3223"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T05:38:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Thursday January 26th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable that the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival in Nautanwa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guides hired, lead by [[Jigme Rinzing]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preparation for the trek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crossing the border. Day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3222</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3222"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T05:37:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday January 25th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival in Nautanwa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guides hired, lead by [[Jigme Rinzing]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preparation for the trek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crossing the border. Day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3221</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3221"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T05:36:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Wednesday January 25th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires an a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears than nothing imoprtant has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival in Nautanwa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guides hired, lead by [[Jigme Rinzing]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preparation for the trek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crossing the border. Day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3220</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3220"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T05:27:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Tuesday January 24th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival in Benares. Riot. train attacked. Change trains.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival in Nautanwa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guides hired, lead by [[Jigme Rinzing]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preparation for the trek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crossing the border. Day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3219</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3219"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T05:22:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;202.74.223.167: /* Monday January 23rd 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039;carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival in Benares. Riot. train attacked. Change trains.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival in Nautanwa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guides hired, lead by [[Jigme Rinzing]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Preparation for the trek.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crossing the border. Day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 - Pokhara. Locate Yangser Chumpo, Quarrie&#039;s guide. Confirmation of Drakmar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 - Rope bridges. Browne has trouble crossing. Resorts to opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7 - Gori Pani - delay for a day as altitude sickness kicks in. This is are far as [[Jigme Rinzing]] and his bearers will be going.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 - Rest in Gori Pani. Find a new guide - [[Tsewan Pemba]] and a new group of 6 bearers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10 - More rope bridges. More opium.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 - Jomoson - the 5 buddhas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13 - The monastery at Kag - find Schippone&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 - Tayen - stories of ghosts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15 - Pemba and the porters quit. Siva says he&#039;ll wait here with the supplies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16 - A day of rest before the mountain&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 - Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 - On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Arrival at Drakmar&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>202.74.223.167</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>